TWQ Series Stopper Cylinder (Height Fixed)

• 

  View options

  Airtac TWQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TWQ50X30SC

  Specifications: TWQ50X30SC is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a round rod end. Double acting. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TWQ Double acting; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included C round rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head round rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at cylinder chamber ports PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-out control in each separate work line PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODSeparate connection at selected valve P/A/B US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R/S only 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable220 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable24 V DC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable110 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable24 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable12 V DC 5/2 control for extension and retraction Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted cylinder-to-valve exhaust and free charging. Valve P/A/B connections use PC1002 at PT1/4. Keep both work lines separate. 5V21008 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V22008 is double-solenoid with memory. Both are 5/2 valves. Final 050/200 means a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not DIN. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% at 2.0 VA; DC is ±10% at 1.6 W. Choose one voltage and control action; valve memory is not mechanical load retention. The selected branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.15–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R/S (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1072 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $125.38

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ20X20SB

  Specifications: TTQ20X20SB is a 20 mm bore, 20 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a flat rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 20 20 mm bore X20 20 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included B flat rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 20 / 20 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.25–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition M5×0.8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head flat rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 107 mm (67 + 40) AB + stroke 42 mm (22 + 20) AC + stroke 65 mm (45 + 20) B 36 C — D 12 J 9 JA 7 K M6×1 KA 10 KB 36 M 24 MA 22 P M5×0.8 PA 16.5 PB 9 E 10 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 20 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.8 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5×0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC6M5: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA6: Two 6 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension PC601: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube ODSeparate connection at selected valve P/A US98A060040100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A060040100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC6M5 at M5×0.8; Install PSA6 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC601 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.25–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.25–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSLM5 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA6 requires exact 6 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 15/12 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 249 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $64.39

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TWQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TWQ40X25RF

  Specifications: TWQ40X25RF is a 40 mm bore, 25 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Double acting. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TWQ Double acting; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 40 40 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet R roller rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this roller rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 40 / 25 mm Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 153.5 mm (103.5 + 50) AB + stroke 76 mm (51 + 25) AC + stroke 77.5 mm (52.5 + 25) AE 4 B 53 C 57 D 25 E 22.5 J 9 JA 7 K M6×1 KA 10 KB 40 M 44 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 20 PB 11 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight connection at cylinder chamber ports PTL801A: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube OD; A-typeMeter-out control in each work line; alternative to the straight cylinder connection US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable220 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable24 V DC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable110 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable24 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female P/A/B; PT1/8 female R/S; terminal cable12 V DC 5/2 control for extension and retraction Cylinder connections use PC801 at PT1/8; PTL801A is a cylinder-port alternative. Select restricted cylinder-to-valve exhaust and free charging. Valve P/A/B connections use PC801 at PT1/8. Keep both work lines separate. 5V11006 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V12006 is double-solenoid with memory. Both are 5/2 valves. Final 050/200 means a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not DIN. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% at 2.0 VA; DC is ±10% at 1.6 W. Choose one voltage and control action; valve memory is not mechanical load retention. The selected branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.15–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R/S (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. PTL801A requires exact 8 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque 0.08 N·m is not thread-tightening torque. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 20/17 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 786 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $115.05

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TWQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TWQ25X20RF

  Specifications: TWQ25X20RF is a 25 mm bore, 20 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Double acting. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TWQ Double acting; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 25 25 mm bore X20 20 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet R roller rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this roller rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 25 / 20 mm Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition M5×0.8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 121 mm (81 + 40) AB + stroke 53 mm (33 + 20) AC + stroke 68 mm (48 + 20) AE 2 B 40 C — D 16 E 14 J 9 JA 7 K M6×1 KA 10 KB 40 M 30 MA 20 P M5×0.8 PA 18 PB 9 R 12 RA 6 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 25 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 1.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses M5×0.8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC6M5: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight connection at cylinder chamber ports PTL6M5A-M: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube OD; A-typeMeter-out control in each work line; alternative to the straight cylinder connection US98A060040100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A060040100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: M5×0.8 female P/A/B; M5×0.8 female R/S; terminal cable220 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: M5×0.8 female P/A/B; M5×0.8 female R/S; terminal cable24 V DC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: M5×0.8 female P/A/B; M5×0.8 female R/S; terminal cable110 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: M5×0.8 female P/A/B; M5×0.8 female R/S; terminal cable24 V AC 5/2 control for extension and retraction 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: M5×0.8 female P/A/B; M5×0.8 female R/S; terminal cable12 V DC 5/2 control for extension and retraction Cylinder connections use PC6M5 at M5×0.8; PTL6M5A-M is a cylinder-port alternative. Select restricted cylinder-to-valve exhaust and free charging. Valve P/A/B connections use PC6M5 at M5×0.8. Keep both work lines separate. 5V110M5 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120M5 is double-solenoid with memory. Both are 5/2 valves. Final 050/200 means a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not DIN. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% at 2.0 VA; DC is ±10% at 1.6 W. Choose one voltage and control action; valve memory is not mechanical load retention. The selected branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.15–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSLM5 at selected valve exhaust R/S (M5×0.8), never at cylinder work ports. PTL6M5A-M requires exact 6 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque 0.05 N·m is not thread-tightening torque. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 15/12 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 345 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $77.21

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SKF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SKF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included K lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 214 mm (154 + 60) AB + stroke 130 mm (100 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 1.5 B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 S 14 T 24 U 38 V 14 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Lever-roller setup and service Parameter Details Dedicated hydraulic shock-absorber replacement ASJ1408 Adjustment Adjustable; set to the actual load Prevent a second load from striking while the shock absorber is fully compressed. Repeated impact without recovery can cause mechanical failure. The absorber supplied for this stopper operates in a pressurized arrangement and differs from a general-purpose absorber. Replace it with the dedicated type when cushioning performance deteriorates. For an adjustable absorber, loosen its retaining screw, adjust the cushioning setting, then tighten and restore any removed stop block. Do not use the fasteners as a way to increase the cylinder pressure rating. The cancellation pin can hold the rocker arm down when the stopping function is not required. Follow the illustrated procedure and isolate unintended machine movement. For the illustrated adjustable K-head absorber, the source limits adjustment rotation to 240°. The locking / anti-rotation arrangement permits direction adjustment after its fastener is loosened. The G flange can also be moved to change installation height; this height adjustment does not apply to the fixed-height Q body. The self-locking rocker arm prevents the stopped workpiece from rebounding under the absorber’s reaction force. The three illustrated states are the initial roller position, locked state and release state. This is an anti-rebound function, not a certification for lifting, guarding or indefinite load holding. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1323 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $214.02

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SK

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SK is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included K lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 214 mm (154 + 60) AB + stroke 130 mm (100 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 1.5 B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 S 14 T 24 U 38 V 14 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Lever-roller setup and service Parameter Details Dedicated hydraulic shock-absorber replacement ASJ1408 Adjustment Adjustable; set to the actual load Prevent a second load from striking while the shock absorber is fully compressed. Repeated impact without recovery can cause mechanical failure. The absorber supplied for this stopper operates in a pressurized arrangement and differs from a general-purpose absorber. Replace it with the dedicated type when cushioning performance deteriorates. For an adjustable absorber, loosen its retaining screw, adjust the cushioning setting, then tighten and restore any removed stop block. Do not use the fasteners as a way to increase the cylinder pressure rating. The cancellation pin can hold the rocker arm down when the stopping function is not required. Follow the illustrated procedure and isolate unintended machine movement. For the illustrated adjustable K-head absorber, the source limits adjustment rotation to 240°. The locking / anti-rotation arrangement permits direction adjustment after its fastener is loosened. The G flange can also be moved to change installation height; this height adjustment does not apply to the fixed-height Q body. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1323 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $214.02

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SRF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SRF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included R roller rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this roller rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 165 mm (105 + 60) AB + stroke 81 mm (51 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 4 B 64 C 71 D 25 E 22.5 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1136 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $154.73

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SR

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SR is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included R roller rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 165 mm (105 + 60) AB + stroke 81 mm (51 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 4 B 64 C 71 D 25 E 22.5 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1136 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $154.73

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SBF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SBF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a flat rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included B flat rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this flat rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head flat rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 E 22.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1090 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $139.99

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SB

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SB is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a flat rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included B flat rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head flat rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 E 22.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1090 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $139.99

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SCF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SCF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a round rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included C round rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this round rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head round rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1089 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $133.36

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30SC

  Specifications: TTQ50X30SC is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a round rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included C round rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head round rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1089 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $133.36

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30KF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30KF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet K lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 214 mm (154 + 60) AB + stroke 130 mm (100 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 1.5 B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 S 14 T 24 U 38 V 14 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Lever-roller setup and service Parameter Details Dedicated hydraulic shock-absorber replacement ASJ1408 Adjustment Adjustable; set to the actual load Prevent a second load from striking while the shock absorber is fully compressed. Repeated impact without recovery can cause mechanical failure. The absorber supplied for this stopper operates in a pressurized arrangement and differs from a general-purpose absorber. Replace it with the dedicated type when cushioning performance deteriorates. For an adjustable absorber, loosen its retaining screw, adjust the cushioning setting, then tighten and restore any removed stop block. Do not use the fasteners as a way to increase the cylinder pressure rating. The cancellation pin can hold the rocker arm down when the stopping function is not required. Follow the illustrated procedure and isolate unintended machine movement. For the illustrated adjustable K-head absorber, the source limits adjustment rotation to 240°. The locking / anti-rotation arrangement permits direction adjustment after its fastener is loosened. The G flange can also be moved to change installation height; this height adjustment does not apply to the fixed-height Q body. The self-locking rocker arm prevents the stopped workpiece from rebounding under the absorber’s reaction force. The three illustrated states are the initial roller position, locked state and release state. This is an anti-rebound function, not a certification for lifting, guarding or indefinite load holding. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1302 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $208.10

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30K

  Specifications: TTQ50X30K is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet K lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 214 mm (154 + 60) AB + stroke 130 mm (100 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 1.5 B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 S 14 T 24 U 38 V 14 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Lever-roller setup and service Parameter Details Dedicated hydraulic shock-absorber replacement ASJ1408 Adjustment Adjustable; set to the actual load Prevent a second load from striking while the shock absorber is fully compressed. Repeated impact without recovery can cause mechanical failure. The absorber supplied for this stopper operates in a pressurized arrangement and differs from a general-purpose absorber. Replace it with the dedicated type when cushioning performance deteriorates. For an adjustable absorber, loosen its retaining screw, adjust the cushioning setting, then tighten and restore any removed stop block. Do not use the fasteners as a way to increase the cylinder pressure rating. The cancellation pin can hold the rocker arm down when the stopping function is not required. Follow the illustrated procedure and isolate unintended machine movement. For the illustrated adjustable K-head absorber, the source limits adjustment rotation to 240°. The locking / anti-rotation arrangement permits direction adjustment after its fastener is loosened. The G flange can also be moved to change installation height; this height adjustment does not apply to the fixed-height Q body. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1302 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $208.10

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30RF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30RF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet R roller rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this roller rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 165 mm (105 + 60) AB + stroke 81 mm (51 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 4 B 64 C 71 D 25 E 22.5 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1115 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $148.81

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30R

  Specifications: TTQ50X30R is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet R roller rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 165 mm (105 + 60) AB + stroke 81 mm (51 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) AE 4 B 64 C 71 D 25 E 22.5 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1115 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $148.81

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30BF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30BF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a flat rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet B flat rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this flat rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head flat rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 E 22.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1069 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $134.07

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30B

  Specifications: TTQ50X30B is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a flat rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet B flat rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head flat rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 E 22.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1069 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $134.07

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30CF

  Specifications: TTQ50X30CF is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a round rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet C round rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this round rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head round rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1068 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $126.45

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X30C

  Specifications: TTQ50X30C is a 50 mm bore, 30 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a round rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet C round rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 30 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head round rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 142 mm (82 + 60) AB + stroke 58 mm (28 + 30) AC + stroke 84 mm (54 + 30) B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1068 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $126.45

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X25SKF

  Specifications: TTQ50X25SKF is a 50 mm bore, 25 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included K lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 25 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 204 mm (154 + 50) AB + stroke 125 mm (100 + 25) AC + stroke 79 mm (54 + 25) AE 1.5 B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 S 14 T 24 U 38 V 14 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Lever-roller setup and service Parameter Details Dedicated hydraulic shock-absorber replacement ASJ1408 Adjustment Adjustable; set to the actual load Prevent a second load from striking while the shock absorber is fully compressed. Repeated impact without recovery can cause mechanical failure. The absorber supplied for this stopper operates in a pressurized arrangement and differs from a general-purpose absorber. Replace it with the dedicated type when cushioning performance deteriorates. For an adjustable absorber, loosen its retaining screw, adjust the cushioning setting, then tighten and restore any removed stop block. Do not use the fasteners as a way to increase the cylinder pressure rating. The cancellation pin can hold the rocker arm down when the stopping function is not required. Follow the illustrated procedure and isolate unintended machine movement. For the illustrated adjustable K-head absorber, the source limits adjustment rotation to 240°. The locking / anti-rotation arrangement permits direction adjustment after its fastener is loosened. The G flange can also be moved to change installation height; this height adjustment does not apply to the fixed-height Q body. The self-locking rocker arm prevents the stopped workpiece from rebounding under the absorber’s reaction force. The three illustrated states are the initial roller position, locked state and release state. This is an anti-rebound function, not a certification for lifting, guarding or indefinite load holding. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1286 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $209.91

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X25SK

  Specifications: TTQ50X25SK is a 50 mm bore, 25 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 slide, clamp and stopper accessories (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included K lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 25 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head lever roller with adjustable hydraulic shock absorber Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 204 mm (154 + 50) AB + stroke 125 mm (100 + 25) AC + stroke 79 mm (54 + 25) AE 1.5 B 64 C 71 D 25 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 S 14 T 24 U 38 V 14 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Lever-roller setup and service Parameter Details Dedicated hydraulic shock-absorber replacement ASJ1408 Adjustment Adjustable; set to the actual load Prevent a second load from striking while the shock absorber is fully compressed. Repeated impact without recovery can cause mechanical failure. The absorber supplied for this stopper operates in a pressurized arrangement and differs from a general-purpose absorber. Replace it with the dedicated type when cushioning performance deteriorates. For an adjustable absorber, loosen its retaining screw, adjust the cushioning setting, then tighten and restore any removed stop block. Do not use the fasteners as a way to increase the cylinder pressure rating. The cancellation pin can hold the rocker arm down when the stopping function is not required. Follow the illustrated procedure and isolate unintended machine movement. For the illustrated adjustable K-head absorber, the source limits adjustment rotation to 240°. The locking / anti-rotation arrangement permits direction adjustment after its fastener is loosened. The G flange can also be moved to change installation height; this height adjustment does not apply to the fixed-height Q body. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1286 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $209.91

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X25SRF

  Specifications: TTQ50X25SRF is a 50 mm bore, 25 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included R roller rod end F Self-lock suffix; its illustrated mechanism applies to the lever-roller head (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT The F suffix is present in this product code. The catalog explains self-locking through the rocker arm of the K lever-roller structure; it does not show a corresponding locking mechanism for this roller rod end. Select this unit by the stated rod-end geometry and do not assume the lever-roller locking mechanism is fitted to it. Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 25 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 155 mm (105 + 50) AB + stroke 76 mm (51 + 25) AC + stroke 79 mm (54 + 25) AE 4 B 64 C 71 D 25 E 22.5 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1093 g estimated configuration reference. The catalog does not separately list every thread, internal-spring or self-lock option, so this value is not an independently measured weight of those options. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $150.23

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TTQ series: conveyor stopper cylinder - TTQ50X25SR

  Specifications: TTQ50X25SR is a 50 mm bore, 25 mm stroke conveyor stopper cylinder with a roller rod end. Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TTQ Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed; fixed-height body with through holes and internal threads at both ends 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included R roller rod end (blank self-lock) Without self-lock (blank thread) Metric port at the explicitly listed M5 sizes; otherwise PT Technical specifications Parameter Details Bore / stroke 50 / 25 mm Acting type Single acting, air retracts the rod and the rear spring extends it when air is removed Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–1.0 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm Basic cushioning Bumper cushion Additional lubrication Not required Air port printed in this edition PT1/8 Mounting Through holes and internal threads at both ends; fixed installation height Stopping head roller rod end Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Drawing letters retain their source meaning; use the matching rod-end drawing for diameters, mounting faces and hole positions. The + stroke and + 2 × stroke formulas have been evaluated for this product. Parameter Details A + 2 × stroke 155 mm (105 + 50) AB + stroke 76 mm (51 + 25) AC + stroke 79 mm (54 + 25) AE 4 B 64 C 71 D 25 E 22.5 J 11 JA 8 K M8×1.25 KA 14 KB 50 M 56 MA 28 P PT1/8 PA 22 PB 12 R 20 RA 8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Conveyor selection and loading Select against the actual moving mass, impact speed, friction and lateral load. The impact-load graphs use conveyor speed in meters per minute; they are not cylinder-travel speed limits. The lateral-load graphs relate transverse load in newtons to operating air pressure. A curve that extends beyond a product’s operating range does not raise its permitted pressure. The TWQ selection page has separate impact-load curves for the round / flat / roller heads and for the K lever-roller head. A K-head curve must not be used to rate a C, B or R head. The 20 and 25 mm TWQ sizes do not list a K-head configuration. Series construction and materials The source exploded view is a representative single-acting TTQ-K at bores 32–50 configuration. Spring, magnet, locking and hydraulic components apply only to the corresponding configuration; the entire parts list is not a statement that every option is supplied with this product. Internal structure and materials 1. Body: Aluminum alloy. 2. Silencer: Sintered bronze particles. 3. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 4. Piston seal: NBR. 5. Magnet: Plastic-bonded magnetic material. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 8. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 9. Absorber adjustment seat: POM. 10. Set screw: Medium-carbon steel. 11. Piston rod: S45C hardened and ground. 12. Fixed seat: Ductile cast iron. 13. Locating pin: Cast steel. 14. Torsion spring: Spring steel. 15. Rocker arm: Cast steel or ductile cast iron. 16. Roller: Low-carbon steel. 17. Steel ball: Stainless steel. 18. Stop block: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 19. Cancellation pin: Aluminum alloy. 20. Anti-rotation washer: Powder-metallurgy alloy. 21. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly. 22. Sliding sleeve: Sintered bronze alloy. 23. Special-shaped seal: NBR. 24. O-ring: NBR. 25. Magnet retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 26. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 27. Spring: Spring steel. 28. Bumper ring: POM. 29. Rear cover: Aluminum alloy. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G, J-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 J-profile: CMSJ — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020, CMSJ-030, CMSJ-050, CMSJ-100, CMSJ-M08, CMSJ-M08010, CMSJ-M08020, CMSJ-M08030, CMSJ-M12, CMSJ-M12010, CMSJ-M12020, CMSJ-M12030, A05-CMSJ-020, A05-CMSJ-030, A05-CMSJ-050, A05-CMSJ-100 J-profile: CMSJ — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSJ-020-H, CMSJ-030-H, CMSJ-050-H, CMSJ-100-H, CMSJ-M08-H, CMSJ-M08010-H, CMSJ-M08020-H, CMSJ-M08030-H, CMSJ-M12-H, CMSJ-M12010-H, CMSJ-M12020-H, CMSJ-M12030-H J-profile: DMSJ — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSJ-020, DMSJ-030, DMSJ-050, DMSJ-100, DMSJ-M08, DMSJ-M08010, DMSJ-M08020, DMSJ-M08030, DMSJ-M12, DMSJ-M12010, DMSJ-M12020, DMSJ-M12030, DMSJ-020-W, DMSJ-030-W, DMSJ-050-W, DMSJ-100-W, A05-DMSJ-020, A05-DMSJ-030, A05-DMSJ-050, A05-DMSJ-100 J-profile: DMSJ — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-N020, DMSJ-N030, DMSJ-N050, DMSJ-N100, DMSJ-NM08, DMSJ-NM08010, DMSJ-NM08020, DMSJ-NM08030, DMSJ-NM12, DMSJ-NM12010, DMSJ-NM12020, DMSJ-NM12030, DMSJ-N020-W, DMSJ-N030-W, DMSJ-N050-W, DMSJ-N100-W J-profile: DMSJ — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSJ-P020, DMSJ-P030, DMSJ-P050, DMSJ-P100, DMSJ-PM08, DMSJ-PM08010, DMSJ-PM08020, DMSJ-PM08030, DMSJ-PM12, DMSJ-PM12010, DMSJ-PM12020, DMSJ-PM12030, DMSJ-P020-W, DMSJ-P030-W, DMSJ-P050-W, DMSJ-P100-W Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed G-profile and J-profile groups are alternative piston-position sensor choices for this S-equipped stopper cylinder. Match its body groove, electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG and CMSJ reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG/DMSJ and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG/DMSJ outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Select lead length to suit the installation independently of the cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMS also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMS-W has direct leads only; the listed EMS-W options also include connectors. DMSJ is not available with A06 cable; the listed A05-DMSJ options use two-wire direct leads. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMS versions with the final -H suffix. The stopper cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected sensor in its matching switch groove on the S-equipped stopper-cylinder body; no separate sensor mounting bracket is required. For a G-profile sensor, loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. For a J-profile sensor, loosen the screw enough to let its lower mounting piece enter the groove. Slide it to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional complete connection and control order codes These separately ordered options supplement the retained circuit reference; they are not supplied as a complete connection kit. Confirm actual flow and stopping response before selection. PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight connection at the single powered cylinder port PSA10: Two 10 mm tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-in for air retraction, with free exhaust for spring extension US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional packaging example; cut to the installed length BSL01: PT1/8 male; 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°CSilencer at selected valve R only 3V106A, 3V106AI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads220 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106B, 3V106BI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106C, 3V106CI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads110 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106E, 3V106EI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads24 V AC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension 3V106F, 3V106FI: PT1/8 female P/A/R; DIN or 0.5 m flying leads12 V DC normally closed 3/2 control for air retraction and spring extension Cylinder connections use PC1001 at PT1/8; Install PSA10 inline. Select restricted valve-to-cylinder charging and free cylinder-to-valve exhaust. Valve P/A connections use PC1001 at PT1/8. Keep one powered line and the valve exhaust open for spring return. 3V106 is direct-acting NC 3/2: energized P→A retracts the rod; de-energized A→R allows the spring to extend it. Its 1.2 mm orifice is conditional on verified flow/response, not the retained 500 mm/s example. Blank entry is DIN; I is 0.5 m flying leads. AC tolerance ±15%, DC ±10%; 220/110 V AC 4.5 VA, 24 V AC 5 VA, 24 V DC 3 W, 12 V DC 2.5 W. Choose one version; the retained 5/2 reference does not establish a single-acting connection. The selected branch is limited to 0.2–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and lower installed-component limits. The body remains rated 0.2–1.0 MPa. The original stopping-load, absorber recovery, self-lock and reference-speed limits still apply. Use BSL01 at selected valve exhaust R (PT1/8), never at cylinder work ports. The original BSL02 has a different thread and is not a direct fit here. PSA10 requires exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tube; rating 0–1 MPa, −20 to +70°C. Orient by the body flow symbol; no A/B order suffix. Closed adjustment is not safety isolation. The blue 100 m rolls are packaging alternatives, not installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; US98A is −20 to +70°C and UE95A −40 to +70°C. Minimum bend radii are 25/20 mm respectively. Apply temperature derating and the common circuit limits.Weight reference 1093 g catalog calculation/reference. The catalog states that actual product weight governs; packaging and shipping weight are excluded.

  Read more less

  $150.23

  View options

Show more products